دليل مرجعي

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsDigital CameraCoolpix S01

ﻲﻌﺟﺮﻣ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﺕﺎﻳﻮﺘﺤﻤﻟﺍ ﻝﻭﺪﺟ

ﻚﺘﻣﻼﺳ ﻞﺟﺃ ﻦﻣ

ﺪﻌﺘﺳﺍ

ﺭﻮﺼﻳ

ﺽﺮﻋ

ﻞﺻﻭ

ﺩﺍﺪﻋﻹﺍ ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻗ

ﺔﻴﻨﻓ ﺕﺎﻈﺣﻼﻣ

ﺱﺮﻬﻓ

Summary of content (96 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪Ar‬‬
PAGE 2
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ COOLPIX S01‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (iv–iii A‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ‪iii ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪v ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ‪1....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪5.......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪6...............................................
PAGE 4
‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪46 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪46 ................................................................. ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ :ViewNX 2‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪47 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪48 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪51 ..................................................................... (DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪53 .....
PAGE 5
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺤﺮﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻓﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1 COOLPIX S01‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪UC-E16 USB‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪2 EH-69P‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3.1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (q‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪ 3.2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ )‪.(e‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪ 3.3‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ 50‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.
PAGE 13
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4.1‬ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4.2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4.3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ I‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪ 4.4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ(‪7 A...........
PAGE 15
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪15 16‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪2 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪9 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) c‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪30 ..........................................................................................
PAGE 16
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻏﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻭﺃﻓﻠﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪ ،(q‬ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.W‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.(30 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.(8 A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪.(54 A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(16 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ( ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪13 A ..........................
PAGE 18
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ "ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺪﻓﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ‪.W‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪11 A .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪9 A .........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪20 A ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪21 A .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪23 A ...................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪24 A ........
PAGE 19
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻼ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪30 A ............................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪43 A ............................
PAGE 21
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪12 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪14 ...........
PAGE 22
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) e :‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‪) f ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(‪) h ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪) g ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪) i ،‬ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪) j ،‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪) G‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،G‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .C‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20 A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪21 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ g‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ×4‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍ ﺧﺘﻴﺎ ﺭ ﻭ ﺿﻊ ‪ G‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ"‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ V‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(26 A‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ c‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 26
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ‪.W‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪20 A ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪23 A ...................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪24 A ........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪26 A .......................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪28 A ...................................AF‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪29 A ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪19 A ....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪16 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ‪19 ،16 .........................................................................................
PAGE 28
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .C‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20 A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪28 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ "ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺎ" ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ )‪( 14 A‬؛ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "ﺗﻤﻮﺝ" ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 30
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪A :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1.4-0.5‬ﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.8-0.5‬ﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ "ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ" ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺬﻛﺮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺘﻴﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ U‬ﺃﻭ ‪ V‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ U‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ V‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪A :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ 300‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ ‪3 ،1‬‬ ‫‪) 3648×2736 q‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪3000‬‬ ‫‪ 23 × 31‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2272×1704 r‬‬ ‫‪7600‬‬ ‫‪ 14 × 19‬ﺳﻢ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪I‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫) ‪ ( X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (20 A‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪D :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.AF‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ AF W‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪D :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ c‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ c‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪31 A ............................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪34 A ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪35 A .......................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪36 A .
PAGE 41
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ c‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 30‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .R‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )‪ (36 A‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )‪ ،(39 A‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪57 ..............................................................
PAGE 43
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .C‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪45 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪37 A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ (g) i‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.×10‬‬ ‫‪:(g) i‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪:(f) h‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﻫﺎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ" ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ (f) h‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :g‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .B‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ (g) i‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ )‪ (40 ،38 A‬ﻭﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.D‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ D‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻭﺃﻓﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.D‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪37 A ................................
PAGE 47
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪y‬؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪38 A ....................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪36 A ....................................
PAGE 48
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.h‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ‪36 A ...‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻘﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 30‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 9000‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺄﻭﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.I‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 52
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺧﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ ﻭﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.E‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ E‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻭﺃﻓﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪45 A .......................‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻼ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪43 A .....................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ .
PAGE 56
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫‪http://nikonimglib.com/nvnx/‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ :ViewNX 2‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )‪.(63 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ .Nikon Transfer 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Windows 7‬ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪82 A ............................. PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪51 A .........................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻭﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.F‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻌﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ 99‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪.y‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ :DPOF‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ))‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ "ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪.DPOF‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 62
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻳﻄﺒﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ I‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EG-CP14‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.A/V‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪HOME‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪55 A‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪56 A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ(‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪HOME‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.HOME‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ(‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.o‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Z‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ w‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )‪ (36 A‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪Language/‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.Language/‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.NTSC‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪2 A ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ .(3 A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫)‪ (2 A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪Firmware‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪Firmware‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪DSCN0001.JPG‬‬ ‫‪ JPG‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪ MOV‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪71 A................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪68 A....................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪72 A...........‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ‪77 A..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪80 A.............................
PAGE 78
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (iv–iii A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪ ﺷﻤﻮﺍﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪-‬ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪ .(2 A‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪° 5‬ﻡ ﻭ‪° 35‬ﻡ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪° 0‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪° 60‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺟﺰﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺦ ﺩﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻪ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺪﺑﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ )‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪11 ،2‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ A/V‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪53 ،48 ،47‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻄﺨﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ" ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ" )ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺠﺐ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪41‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪) O‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺣﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ * ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ * ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﺤﺸﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪COOLPIX S01‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ 10.1‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪-1/2.9‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ؛ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ 10.34 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،NIKKOR‬ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ‪×3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 12.3–4.1‬ﻣﻢ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 87-29‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ]‪([135‬‬ ‫‪f/3.3–5.
PAGE 91
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1–1/2000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪ (ND‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧ ﹰﻴﺎ‬ ‫)‪(AV –3‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ )‪ f/3.3‬ﻭ‪([W] f/9.3‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‬ ‫• ‪ 1.4 – 0.5 :W‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ؛ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫• ‪ 0.8 – 0.
PAGE 92
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪EH-69P‬‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240–100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 0.042–0.068‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 5.0‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 550 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ – ‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 54 × 22 × 55‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫‪ 55‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪(FreeType2‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪FreeType2)) FreeType‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫© ‪ 2012‬ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪.(http://www.freetype.org) The FreeType Project‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(HarfBuzz‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪HarfBuzz)) MIT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫© ‪ 2012‬ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪The HarfBuzz Project‬‬ ‫)‪.(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪55 ،7 ...................................................(HOME) W‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪8 ................................................‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪30 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪31 ،16 ....................................................‬‬ ‫‪) z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪54 .............................................................‬‬ ‫‪) h‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ(‪38 .......................................
PAGE 95
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪22 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪53 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪60 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪29 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪25 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪43 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻎ‪1 .....................................
PAGE 96
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.